دليل القائمة

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsCamerasD500

ﺕﺎﻴﻟﺎﻤﻜﻟﺍ ﻦﻋ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻣ ﻡﺪﻘﻳﻭ ﻢﺋﺍﻮﻘﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺭﺎﻴﺧ ﻞﻴﺼﻔﺘﻟﺎﺑ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺢﺿﻮﻳ

.ﻯﺮﺧﻷﺍ ﺓﺰﻬﺟﻷﺎﺑ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﺻﻮﺗ ﺔﻴﻔﻴﻛ ﻦﻋﻭ

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (208 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪10 ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪20 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪21 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪21 .................................................................
PAGE 3
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪46 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪47 ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪48 .............................................................................................NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪49 ......................................................................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪50 ...........
PAGE 4
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪63 .............................................................................Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪63 ................................................................................Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪63 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‪64 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‪64 .................
PAGE 5
‫‪ :b‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪83 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪83 ............................................................................ISO‬‬ ‫‪ :b2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪83 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b3‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪83 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b4‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪84 ...........................
PAGE 6
‫‪ :e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪93 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪93 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪94 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪94 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :e4‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ M ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪95 ...........
PAGE 7
‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪124 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪125 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪125 .............................................................................................. (Language‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪126 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪127 ..................
PAGE 8
‫‪147 .....................................................................................................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪148 ...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪148 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪149 .....................................................................................................
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪184‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪184 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪185 .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪185 .............................................................................................ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪186 ....................................................................
PAGE 10
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 11
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ )‪(36 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ )‪(36 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )‪(39 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ )‪(40 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ )‪(40 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(41 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(45 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(46 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(47 0‬‬ ‫‪JPEG/TIFF‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪(48 0) NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(4
PAGE 12
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪sRGB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(51 0) Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(52 0‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ )‪(53 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪(53 0) NR‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ )‪(54 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ )‪(54 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ )‪(55 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ )‪(55 0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(56 0‬‬ ‫‪* (56‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ )‪0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
PAGE 13
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )‪(60 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )‪(60 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(60 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )‪(61 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪(61 0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(62 0) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪(63 0‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(63 0) Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ )‪(63 0‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ )‪(64 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ )‪(64 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(65
PAGE 14
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪a1‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a4‬‬ ‫‪a5‬‬ ‫‪a6‬‬ ‫‪a7‬‬ ‫‪a8‬‬ ‫‪a10‬‬ ‫‪a11‬‬ ‫‪a12‬‬ ‫‪a13‬‬ ‫‪b1‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b3‬‬ ‫‪b4‬‬ ‫‪b5‬‬ ‫‪b6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪(73 0) AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪(74 0) AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )‪(75 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫)‪(76 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )‪(76 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪(76 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ )‪(77 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸ
PAGE 15
‫‪b7‬‬ ‫‪c1‬‬ ‫‪c2‬‬ ‫‪c3‬‬ ‫‪c4‬‬ ‫‪d1‬‬ ‫‪d2‬‬ ‫‪d3‬‬ ‫‪d4‬‬ ‫‪d5‬‬ ‫‪d6‬‬ ‫‪d7‬‬ ‫‪d8‬‬ ‫‪d9‬‬ ‫‪d10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪(85 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪(86 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )‪(86 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪(87 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪(87 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪(88 0) CL‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ
PAGE 16
‫‪e1‬‬ ‫‪e2‬‬ ‫‪e3‬‬ ‫‪e4‬‬ ‫‪e5‬‬ ‫‪e6‬‬ ‫‪e7‬‬ ‫‪f1‬‬ ‫‪f2‬‬ ‫‪f3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(93 0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(94 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(94 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ M ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(95 0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ )‪(95 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(96 0) (M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ )‪(96 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ )‪(97 0‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ‪y +‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪y + Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ‪y +‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪y + BKT‬
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ f4‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(111 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪f5‬‬ ‫‪f6‬‬ ‫‪f7‬‬ ‫‪f8‬‬ ‫‪f9‬‬ ‫‪f10‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )‪(114 0‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )‪(114 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ )‪(115 0‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪(115 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ )‪(115 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪(116 0) MB-D17‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪y + Fn‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ g1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ )‪(119
PAGE 18
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪(126 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪(127 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪(128 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪(130 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(133 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ )‪(141 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪(142 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪(142 0) HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍ
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )‪(143 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ GPS‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(144 0) (WR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ )‪(145 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ )‪(145 0‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )‪(147 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪(149 0) Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪(151 0) MB-D17‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )‪(152 0‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )‪(154 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗ
PAGE 20
‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪D500‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) 2‬ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(J‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ L‬ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ؛ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ )‪ (37 0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺫﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(؟ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 27
‫‪ D‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (28 0‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ )ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪DSC_0015.jpg‬‬ ‫‪DSC_0004.jpg DSC_0014.jpg‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪DSC_0003.jpg‬‬ ‫‪DSC_0002.jpg‬‬ ‫‪DSC_0001.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ"‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻋﺮﺿﻲ" )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ 2 ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ‪/‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .(36 0‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ W‬ﺃﻭ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :W‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :X‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 38
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ "_‪ "DSC‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ،"_DSC" ،(52 0) Adobe RGB‬ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ )ﻣﺜﻞ‪ .("DSC_0001.JPG" ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ "‪ "DSC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ XQD‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ XQD‬ﻛﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻌﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 42
‫• ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .
PAGE 43
‫❚❚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ SB-5000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪SB-5000‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 44
‫❚❚ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻟـ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪ ،(43 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫❚❚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AWL‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،(24 × 16) DX‬ﻭ ×‪(18 × 12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪(24 × 16) DX a‬‬ ‫‪(18 × 12) 1.3× Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 15.7 × 23.5‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.(DX‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 12.0 × 18.0‬ﻣﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪NEF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪+ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ★‪/‬‬ ‫)‪+ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)‪+ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪/‬‬ ‫★ ‪NEF/JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪ A‬ﺿﻐﻂ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ؛‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻨﺠﻤﺔ )"★"(‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ؛ ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ JPEG/TIFF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺿﻐﻂ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ NEF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 40% – 20‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ NEF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 55% – 35‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭ ‪ .51200‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 5‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ ISO 51200‬ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 50
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ .
PAGE 56
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ )‪ (j‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (k‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (l‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪(m) WB‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ (y) ADL‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ‪ 0‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ :‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ :‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (E‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(13 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ "‪.(39 0) "DSC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ :(M‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ M‬ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ ISO 100‬ﻭ ‪ .Hi 5‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ :(M‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ ،M‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ )‪ .(50 0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫)‪ .(51 0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ )‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻞ "ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ" )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(54 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (204 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a1‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a4‬‬ ‫‪a5‬‬ ‫‪a6‬‬ ‫‪a7‬‬ ‫‪a8‬‬ ‫‪a9‬‬ ‫‪a10‬‬ ‫‪a11‬‬ ‫‪a12‬‬ ‫‪a13‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b1‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b3‬‬ ‫‪b4‬‬ ‫‪b5‬‬ ‫‪b6‬‬ ‫‪b7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ
PAGE 69
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c1‬‬ ‫‪c2‬‬ ‫‪c3‬‬ ‫‪c4‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪d1‬‬ ‫‪d2‬‬ ‫‪d3‬‬ ‫‪d4‬‬ ‫‪d5‬‬ ‫‪d6‬‬ ‫‪d7‬‬ ‫‪d8‬‬ ‫‪d9‬‬ ‫‪d10‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪e1‬‬ ‫‪e2‬‬ ‫‪e3‬‬ ‫‪e4‬‬ ‫‪e5‬‬ ‫‪e6‬‬ ‫‪e7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪CL‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
PAGE 70
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ f‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ f1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ f2‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ f3‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ f4‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ f5‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ f6‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪ f7‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ f8‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ D f9‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ f10‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪MB-D17‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ g1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫* ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪ .
PAGE 72
‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(Q) O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ )‪.(14 0‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(Q) O‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .14‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪ :a‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-C‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .
PAGE 74
‫‪ :a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-S‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﺃﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪ :a3‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-C‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) 5‬ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ( ﻭ ‪) 1‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫‪ :a4‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :a5‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫‪ :a7‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ" )ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ(‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ" )ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ" ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﹴ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪ :a9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ(‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪ :a11‬ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ "ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺣﺎﻓﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪ :a12‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻼ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪ :a13‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .
PAGE 83
‫‪ :b‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪ :b4‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ E‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.±0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ .
PAGE 85
‫‪ :b5‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ U‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :b6‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،CPU‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻢ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪ :c‬ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :c1‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪ :c3‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ :d1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪CL‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CL‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :d2‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫‪ :d4‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :d5‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪ :d7‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 999‬ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ 999‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،9999‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 999‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 992‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻗﻢ ﺑـ ‪ 9992‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d7‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻫﻴﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪T‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Y‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪U‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(Q/Z) L‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(Q) O‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪X‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪(M) W‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪J‬‬ ‫‪ :d10‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ‪VR‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜ ﱢﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪ :e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪-‬‬ ‫‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫‪ :e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪ :e4‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ M ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪ :e6‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ(‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪ :f‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ :f1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍ ﹰﺀ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪" A‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ" ﻭ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ"‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ" ﻭ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ"‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ" ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﻴﻦ" )ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ" )ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ(‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a7‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ .
PAGE 101
‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﹰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻉ ﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪+ NEF (RAW) 4‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ 102‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫"‪ "RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)ﺳﺘﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫‪ A‬ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ" )ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ(‪ .
PAGE 105
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻌﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺭ ‪y + Pv‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺯﺭ ‪y + Fn1‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ‪y +‬‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺯﺭ ‪y + BKT‬‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪* y +‬‬ ‫* ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ $‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪) HDR 2‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪ v‬
PAGE 107
‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪.(132 0) CPU‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ )‪.(53 0‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪.(89 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.
PAGE 108
‫❚❚ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ 7‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)‪ x‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫)‪ Y‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪ .
PAGE 109
‫‪ :f2‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.
PAGE 110
‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ o‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ )‪(100%) 1 : 1 ،(50%‬‬ ‫‪ p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ )‪ .(200%‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪ :f3‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .M‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .M‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪ :f4‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪،(A‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫‪ :f5‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪ :f7‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ،(W‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪ (V‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :f8‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،a‬ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫‪ :f10‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪MB-D17‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MB-D17‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،MB-D17‬ﺳﻮﺍ ﹰﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻓﻲ ‪MB-D17‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ AF-ON‬ﻓﻲ ‪MB-D17‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪MB-D17‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 117
‫❚❚ ﺯﺭ ‪y + Fn‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 105‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 118
‫❚❚ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ x‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ Y‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪/HF‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ GE‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ(‪.
PAGE 119
‫‪ :g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ :g1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ(‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ(‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪+‬‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ –‬ ‫‪ r‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪ s‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬
PAGE 121
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .Pv‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( < ﺯﺭ ‪< Fn1‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ – ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( < ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ –‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ < ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ +‬ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .1‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 123
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻌﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺭ ‪y + Pv‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺯﺭ ‪y + Fn1‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ‪y +‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ،1080 × 1920‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪154‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪158‬‬ ‫‪155‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪158‬‬ ‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.18‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪(M) W‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(X‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 129
‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(AUTO‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫)‪B‬؛ ﺧﻂ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺎﻡ )‪W‬؛ ﺧﻂ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ؛ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪) Capture NX-D‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ CPU‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 135
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ؛ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 136
‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .
PAGE 137
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ .Capture NX-D‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .39‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 36‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 138
‫‪IPTC‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟـ ‪ IPTC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟـ ‪ IPTC‬ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ IPTC Preset Manager‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 139
‫❚❚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.
PAGE 140
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪IPTC‬‬ ‫‪ IPTC‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ‪" International Press Telecommunications Council‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻔﻴﺔ" )‪ (IPTC‬ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ؛ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .
PAGE 141
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(AF-S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ GPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،GPS‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .GPS‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WR‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 145
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪WR-R10‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ .WR-A10‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻮﻛﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 146
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ‪ FTP‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺛﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟـ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ )‪ (145 0‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :j‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫• ‪ :k‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) l‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) l‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ(‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬؛ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :m‬ﺧﻄﺄ — ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 151
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪MB-D17‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MB-D17‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ EN-EL15/EN-EL15a‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .MB-D17‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ MB-D17‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ w‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ MB-D17‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 154
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪MB-D17‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .MB-D17‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ،EN-EL18/EN-EL18a/EN-EL18b‬ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ؛ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫)ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ(‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 156‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪(d-6–d-1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Picture Control‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍ
PAGE 157
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺯﻥ(‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫‪IPTC‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ
PAGE 158
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ D500‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑـ "‪ "NCSETUP‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺤﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 159
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪.X‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (M) W‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،NEF + JPEG‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ .
PAGE 161
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c4‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.(87 0 ،‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.(X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 163
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ؛ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪(M) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺿﻐﻂ ‪) 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪X‬؛ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(M/W‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ )‪ JPEG+NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)‪ TIFF (RGB‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ JPEG (46 0‬ﺟﻴﺪ ★؛ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 168
‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ" ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ؛ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 170
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ؛ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 171
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 172
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺯﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻇﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ "ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ )ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ 3 ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 174
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪47 ،46 0‬؛ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 175
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .X‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (M) W‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .1‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،J‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.
PAGE 176
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪) J‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.(M) W‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 178
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 179
‫‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻬﺎ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪.(183 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 180
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .V‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 4-1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 181
‫❚❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(Q) O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ (Q) O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 182
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪3-2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﹰﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻟـ ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ <‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻟـ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ < ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ISO 100‬؛ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ f/1.4‬ﻭﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪f/16‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪(AF-S NIKKOR 50 f/1.
PAGE 185
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫‪ ViewNX-i‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Capture NX-D‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 186
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.(185 0) ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 187
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻓﻲ ‪.ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Nikon Transfer 2‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows 7 A‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪) Import pictures and videos‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Change program‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ .
PAGE 188
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start Transfer‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Start Transfer‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪﹺ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.
PAGE 189
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺛﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ (198 0) WT-7‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪ FTP‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺛﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪:WT-7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪FTP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ,ftp‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 190
‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﺛﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻳﺜﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ‪HTTP‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ‪.
PAGE 191
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (46 0) TIFF (RGB‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .
PAGE 192
‫❚❚ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(M) W‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (M) W‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 193
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .
PAGE 194
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ (201 0) (HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) C‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .K‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 195
‫❚❚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (124 0‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ .
PAGE 196
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ 95%‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ < HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )‪.(195 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(30 0‬‬ ‫‪ HDMI A‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 197
‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D500‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :(153 0) EN-EL15‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻭﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.EN-EL15a‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :MH-25a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ MH-25a‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .EN-EL15‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.
PAGE 198
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ •‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫)‪(189 0‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D500‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ C-PL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C-PLII‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪ (NC‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻘﻒ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 199
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ • ﺣﺸﺎﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪UF-7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺣﺸﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ UF3-RU14‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ‪ UF-7‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)‪(189 0‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻴﺔ ‪ UF3-RU14‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.
PAGE 200
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ • ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :WR-T10/WR-R10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ ،WR-A10‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.WR-T10‬‬ ‫)‪(145 ،144 0‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 201
‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ • ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :DK-18‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ DK-18‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪ DG-2‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ DR-3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.D500‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪/DK-14‬ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪ :DK-17A‬ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﻦ ‪ :DK-17F‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.
PAGE 202
‫ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪/BF-1B‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ :BF1-A‬ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D500‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻱ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪ .
PAGE 203
‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :MC-25A/MC-25‬ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﺑﻮﺳﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺑﻮﺳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻃﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ MW-2‬ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪ MT-2‬ﻭﻃﻘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪) ML-2‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 20‬ﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ WR‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :WR-A10‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﻱ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ‪.
PAGE 204
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪ :ME-1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ME-1‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :ME-W1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ UF-8‬ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻗﻨﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ME-1‬ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 205
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(q‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EP-5B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 206
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EH-5b‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ (e‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ .(r‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ P‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 207
PAGE 208
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.